Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC 12Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System 18Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers 19DeviceNet Power Supply 22
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up 22Series M Sections 22Series L Sections 23
Network Grounding at the Power Supply 23Best Grounding Practice 23
Connecting Two Power Supplies 24Start-Up and Training Aids 25
IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course 25Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs 26Training Cases 29
System Design Installation Checklist 30DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist 30How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) 31
Background 31Definition of EDS Files 32Necessary EDS Files 32Installing EDS Files 32Finding EDS Files for Other Devices 33Uploading EDS Files from the Device 33
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
ii DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
1 Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Table A Publications
Table B Websites
Table C Technical Support
Title Description Publication Number
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg
Motor Control Centers Brochure 2100-BR002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligence within an MCCmdashIntelliCENTERreg Brochure PCP-BR001x-EN-P
IntelliCENTER Software User Guide User Manual 2100-UM002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligent Motor Control Centers White Paper 2100-WP001x-EN-P
Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Instructions 2100-IN010x-ENP
DeviceNet Media Design Installation Guide User Manual DNET-UM072x-EN-P
KwikLink Radiated Immunity Testing White Paper 1485-WP001x-US-P
KwikLink Connection System Brochure Brochure 1485-CG001x-EN-P
x is a placeholder for the revision letter of the publication When referencing publication via The Literature Library (wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) always use the latest revision available
Electronic data sheets (EDS) files httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) httpwwwodvaorg
Type of support Access at
Telephone 4406465800
Fax 4143820505
E-mail raictechsupportrarockwellcom
Internet website httpwwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
2 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Overview This document describes cable system construction and components associated with a DeviceNet network that is factory installed in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg and IntelliCENTERreg motor control centers (MCCs)
DeviceNet DeviceNet is a low-cost communication link to connect industrial devices (such as limit switches photoelectric sensors motor starters push buttons variable frequency drives and operator interfaces) to a network and eliminate time-consuming and costly hardwiring
DeviceNet is a simple open networking solution based on the producerconsumer model the latest in network technology This technology allows for real-time control data exchange configuration capabilities and collection of data at regular intervals or on demand The network specifications and protocol are openmdashmanaged by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA)mdashmeaning that vendors are not required to purchase hardware software or licensing rights to connect devices to a system This has resulted in over 300 vendors offering DeviceNet products and over a half million installed nodes worldwide
DeviceNet in MCCs DeviceNet is ideally suited for MCC applications with respect to cost and performance This document details the applications of DeviceNet in MCCs including cable system construction and common DeviceNet components
System Architecture When designing DeviceNet systems it is necessary to consider the following factors
bull Node Countbull Cable Type and Lengthsbull Terminating Resistors with Internal and External Devices
Node Count
DeviceNet can accommodate 64 nodes Typically three nodes are reserved for the scanner PC and a new device
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 3
Node count is also affected by performance needs and future expandability To ensure this use following the table to set node count guidelines
Cable Length Limitations
Cable lengths are calculated for two types of types of cables trunk and drop Trunk cable is all cable directly between terminating resistors All other cable is drop cable
Trunk Cable Routing
Series M Sections (May 2001 and later)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly is typically mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars The trunk line continues vertically behind the vertical wireway joined to the horizontal portion via a DeviceNet connector
In a standard MCC section the vertical segment of trunk line has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with communicating devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device plugged into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a unit with a communicating device occupies a full section only one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the left side and a receptacle on the right side It is accessible from any unattached side of a section by removing the center end cover plate
Baud Rate DeviceNet MCC IntelliCENTER MCC
125K 50 Not Supported
250K 50 35
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
50 50
Baud Rate Trunk Drop(2)
(2)No single drop can exceed 20 ft (6m) in length
125K 1378 ft (420m) 512 ft (156m)
250K 656 ft (200m) 256 ft (78m)
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
246 ft (75m) 128 ft (39m)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
ii DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
1 Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Table A Publications
Table B Websites
Table C Technical Support
Title Description Publication Number
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg
Motor Control Centers Brochure 2100-BR002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligence within an MCCmdashIntelliCENTERreg Brochure PCP-BR001x-EN-P
IntelliCENTER Software User Guide User Manual 2100-UM002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligent Motor Control Centers White Paper 2100-WP001x-EN-P
Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Instructions 2100-IN010x-ENP
DeviceNet Media Design Installation Guide User Manual DNET-UM072x-EN-P
KwikLink Radiated Immunity Testing White Paper 1485-WP001x-US-P
KwikLink Connection System Brochure Brochure 1485-CG001x-EN-P
x is a placeholder for the revision letter of the publication When referencing publication via The Literature Library (wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) always use the latest revision available
Electronic data sheets (EDS) files httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) httpwwwodvaorg
Type of support Access at
Telephone 4406465800
Fax 4143820505
E-mail raictechsupportrarockwellcom
Internet website httpwwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
2 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Overview This document describes cable system construction and components associated with a DeviceNet network that is factory installed in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg and IntelliCENTERreg motor control centers (MCCs)
DeviceNet DeviceNet is a low-cost communication link to connect industrial devices (such as limit switches photoelectric sensors motor starters push buttons variable frequency drives and operator interfaces) to a network and eliminate time-consuming and costly hardwiring
DeviceNet is a simple open networking solution based on the producerconsumer model the latest in network technology This technology allows for real-time control data exchange configuration capabilities and collection of data at regular intervals or on demand The network specifications and protocol are openmdashmanaged by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA)mdashmeaning that vendors are not required to purchase hardware software or licensing rights to connect devices to a system This has resulted in over 300 vendors offering DeviceNet products and over a half million installed nodes worldwide
DeviceNet in MCCs DeviceNet is ideally suited for MCC applications with respect to cost and performance This document details the applications of DeviceNet in MCCs including cable system construction and common DeviceNet components
System Architecture When designing DeviceNet systems it is necessary to consider the following factors
bull Node Countbull Cable Type and Lengthsbull Terminating Resistors with Internal and External Devices
Node Count
DeviceNet can accommodate 64 nodes Typically three nodes are reserved for the scanner PC and a new device
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 3
Node count is also affected by performance needs and future expandability To ensure this use following the table to set node count guidelines
Cable Length Limitations
Cable lengths are calculated for two types of types of cables trunk and drop Trunk cable is all cable directly between terminating resistors All other cable is drop cable
Trunk Cable Routing
Series M Sections (May 2001 and later)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly is typically mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars The trunk line continues vertically behind the vertical wireway joined to the horizontal portion via a DeviceNet connector
In a standard MCC section the vertical segment of trunk line has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with communicating devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device plugged into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a unit with a communicating device occupies a full section only one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the left side and a receptacle on the right side It is accessible from any unattached side of a section by removing the center end cover plate
Baud Rate DeviceNet MCC IntelliCENTER MCC
125K 50 Not Supported
250K 50 35
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
50 50
Baud Rate Trunk Drop(2)
(2)No single drop can exceed 20 ft (6m) in length
125K 1378 ft (420m) 512 ft (156m)
250K 656 ft (200m) 256 ft (78m)
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
246 ft (75m) 128 ft (39m)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
1 Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Table A Publications
Table B Websites
Table C Technical Support
Title Description Publication Number
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg
Motor Control Centers Brochure 2100-BR002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligence within an MCCmdashIntelliCENTERreg Brochure PCP-BR001x-EN-P
IntelliCENTER Software User Guide User Manual 2100-UM002x-EN-P
Integrated Intelligent Motor Control Centers White Paper 2100-WP001x-EN-P
Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Instructions 2100-IN010x-ENP
DeviceNet Media Design Installation Guide User Manual DNET-UM072x-EN-P
KwikLink Radiated Immunity Testing White Paper 1485-WP001x-US-P
KwikLink Connection System Brochure Brochure 1485-CG001x-EN-P
x is a placeholder for the revision letter of the publication When referencing publication via The Literature Library (wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) always use the latest revision available
Electronic data sheets (EDS) files httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) httpwwwodvaorg
Type of support Access at
Telephone 4406465800
Fax 4143820505
E-mail raictechsupportrarockwellcom
Internet website httpwwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
2 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Overview This document describes cable system construction and components associated with a DeviceNet network that is factory installed in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg and IntelliCENTERreg motor control centers (MCCs)
DeviceNet DeviceNet is a low-cost communication link to connect industrial devices (such as limit switches photoelectric sensors motor starters push buttons variable frequency drives and operator interfaces) to a network and eliminate time-consuming and costly hardwiring
DeviceNet is a simple open networking solution based on the producerconsumer model the latest in network technology This technology allows for real-time control data exchange configuration capabilities and collection of data at regular intervals or on demand The network specifications and protocol are openmdashmanaged by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA)mdashmeaning that vendors are not required to purchase hardware software or licensing rights to connect devices to a system This has resulted in over 300 vendors offering DeviceNet products and over a half million installed nodes worldwide
DeviceNet in MCCs DeviceNet is ideally suited for MCC applications with respect to cost and performance This document details the applications of DeviceNet in MCCs including cable system construction and common DeviceNet components
System Architecture When designing DeviceNet systems it is necessary to consider the following factors
bull Node Countbull Cable Type and Lengthsbull Terminating Resistors with Internal and External Devices
Node Count
DeviceNet can accommodate 64 nodes Typically three nodes are reserved for the scanner PC and a new device
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 3
Node count is also affected by performance needs and future expandability To ensure this use following the table to set node count guidelines
Cable Length Limitations
Cable lengths are calculated for two types of types of cables trunk and drop Trunk cable is all cable directly between terminating resistors All other cable is drop cable
Trunk Cable Routing
Series M Sections (May 2001 and later)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly is typically mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars The trunk line continues vertically behind the vertical wireway joined to the horizontal portion via a DeviceNet connector
In a standard MCC section the vertical segment of trunk line has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with communicating devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device plugged into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a unit with a communicating device occupies a full section only one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the left side and a receptacle on the right side It is accessible from any unattached side of a section by removing the center end cover plate
Baud Rate DeviceNet MCC IntelliCENTER MCC
125K 50 Not Supported
250K 50 35
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
50 50
Baud Rate Trunk Drop(2)
(2)No single drop can exceed 20 ft (6m) in length
125K 1378 ft (420m) 512 ft (156m)
250K 656 ft (200m) 256 ft (78m)
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
246 ft (75m) 128 ft (39m)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
2 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Overview This document describes cable system construction and components associated with a DeviceNet network that is factory installed in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINEreg and IntelliCENTERreg motor control centers (MCCs)
DeviceNet DeviceNet is a low-cost communication link to connect industrial devices (such as limit switches photoelectric sensors motor starters push buttons variable frequency drives and operator interfaces) to a network and eliminate time-consuming and costly hardwiring
DeviceNet is a simple open networking solution based on the producerconsumer model the latest in network technology This technology allows for real-time control data exchange configuration capabilities and collection of data at regular intervals or on demand The network specifications and protocol are openmdashmanaged by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA)mdashmeaning that vendors are not required to purchase hardware software or licensing rights to connect devices to a system This has resulted in over 300 vendors offering DeviceNet products and over a half million installed nodes worldwide
DeviceNet in MCCs DeviceNet is ideally suited for MCC applications with respect to cost and performance This document details the applications of DeviceNet in MCCs including cable system construction and common DeviceNet components
System Architecture When designing DeviceNet systems it is necessary to consider the following factors
bull Node Countbull Cable Type and Lengthsbull Terminating Resistors with Internal and External Devices
Node Count
DeviceNet can accommodate 64 nodes Typically three nodes are reserved for the scanner PC and a new device
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 3
Node count is also affected by performance needs and future expandability To ensure this use following the table to set node count guidelines
Cable Length Limitations
Cable lengths are calculated for two types of types of cables trunk and drop Trunk cable is all cable directly between terminating resistors All other cable is drop cable
Trunk Cable Routing
Series M Sections (May 2001 and later)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly is typically mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars The trunk line continues vertically behind the vertical wireway joined to the horizontal portion via a DeviceNet connector
In a standard MCC section the vertical segment of trunk line has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with communicating devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device plugged into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a unit with a communicating device occupies a full section only one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the left side and a receptacle on the right side It is accessible from any unattached side of a section by removing the center end cover plate
Baud Rate DeviceNet MCC IntelliCENTER MCC
125K 50 Not Supported
250K 50 35
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
50 50
Baud Rate Trunk Drop(2)
(2)No single drop can exceed 20 ft (6m) in length
125K 1378 ft (420m) 512 ft (156m)
250K 656 ft (200m) 256 ft (78m)
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
246 ft (75m) 128 ft (39m)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 3
Node count is also affected by performance needs and future expandability To ensure this use following the table to set node count guidelines
Cable Length Limitations
Cable lengths are calculated for two types of types of cables trunk and drop Trunk cable is all cable directly between terminating resistors All other cable is drop cable
Trunk Cable Routing
Series M Sections (May 2001 and later)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly is typically mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars The trunk line continues vertically behind the vertical wireway joined to the horizontal portion via a DeviceNet connector
In a standard MCC section the vertical segment of trunk line has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with communicating devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device plugged into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a unit with a communicating device occupies a full section only one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the left side and a receptacle on the right side It is accessible from any unattached side of a section by removing the center end cover plate
Baud Rate DeviceNet MCC IntelliCENTER MCC
125K 50 Not Supported
250K 50 35
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
50 50
Baud Rate Trunk Drop(2)
(2)No single drop can exceed 20 ft (6m) in length
125K 1378 ft (420m) 512 ft (156m)
250K 656 ft (200m) 256 ft (78m)
500K(1)
(1)To achieve maximum performance of an IntelliCENTER MCC 500K baud should be used
246 ft (75m) 128 ft (39m)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
4 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 1 Typical Single MCC Section (Series M)
Series L Sections (through May 2001)
The DeviceNet trunk line assembly typically is mounted in a channel above the horizontal power bus bars If a neutral bus is mounted in the upper channel the trunk line assembly will be mounted below the horizontal power bus bars
The DeviceNet drop line is located behind the vertical wireway and attaches to the trunk line via a DeviceNet connector It has six DeviceNet ports directly connected to it that are built into the back of the vertical wireway Units with connecting devices have a DeviceNet drop line from the device that plugs into the ports Each port is independent allowing any unit to be plugged in and removed without affecting adjacent units If a communicating device is present in a unit occupying a full section one DeviceNet port is supplied
The trunk line terminates with a DeviceNet plug on the leftmost side and a receptacle on the rightmost side of a shipping block It is accessible from the unattached left and right sides of a shipping block by removing the center end cover plate
DeviceNet Trunk Line
Linking Plug Linking Receptacle
3-Phase Horizontal Power Bus
Trunk line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Drop line behind the vertical wireway and six (6) DeviceNet ports in the wireway
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
6 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Calculating Cable Lengths
Cable lengths can also be calculated using the following guidelines
bull Series L MCCndash 2 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash 7 feet drop per section (plus unit drop cables)
bull Series M MCCndash 14 feet trunk per section (do not include frame-mounted sections)ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the top
port bull Add 3 feet drop and subtract 3 feet trunk
ndash If using a terminating resistor or extending the trunk from the bottom port
bull Add 5 feet drop and subtract 5 feet trunkbull All series
ndash 3 feet trunk for each frame-mounted sectionndash Measure each unit drop cable or estimate 2 feet per unit drop cablendash Add all trunk and drop cable lengths external to the MCC
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 7
MCC Cable Types
Three types of media (cable) are used in MCCs for DeviceNet communication
NOTE If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
ATTENTION
Do not apply high voltage to any installed DeviceNet cable system or its connectors The high voltage will destroy internal capacitors in the connectors Test equipment such as a meggar or hi-pot will damage the internal capacitors
ATTENTION
The Rockwell Automation media checker (catalog number 1788-MCHKR) can be used with MCC DeviceNet installations The cable length calculation will not be accurate because of the internal capacitors in the connectors
Type Flatbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 ampsbull 4 conductormdashunshielded
Roundbull Class 1 600 Volts 8 amps bull 4 Conductormdashshielded
Use Trunk lines (and drop lines in series L sections)
Connecting units to DeviceNet ports (unit drop lines)
Trunk line for extending trunk beyond MCC
Part Number 1485C-P1E75 (75 m spool)1485C-P1E200 (200 m spool)1485C-P1E420 (420 m spool)
2100H-DNRC1 (50 m spool) Belden 7897A 7896A1485C-P1BS75 (75m spool)
Flat Cable Round Drop Cable Round Trunk Cable
ATTENTION
If the cable has a shield it must be grounded at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
8 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors are necessary at the ends of trunk lines to reduce reflections of the communication signals on the network The DeviceNet network will operate correctly only when there are exactly two terminating resistors one at each end of the trunk line Terminating resistors must be equal to 121 ohms 1 14W metal film (terminating resistor part number 1485A-C2)
MCC line-ups ship with a clear bag containing 2 five-terminal plug connectors with terminating resistors installed and two DeviceNet splitter connectors (kit part number 2100H-DNTR1) The resistors are inserted in the second terminal from each end (connected to the white and blue conductors) of both plugs (See Figure 4) The DeviceNet splitter connector is used to plug two DeviceNet connectors into one wireway port
IMPORTANT It is not recommended to use both Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system These two cable types are not compatible because the following properties are different
Using Class 1- and Class 2-rated cables within the same DeviceNet system can result in application code and communication problems
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 9
Figure 4 Five-terminal Plug Connector Plug Number 22112-215-01 with jack screws
The bag is attached to a wireway tie bar in the vertical wireway of the section that contains documentation (identified by a label on the horizontal wireway cover of this section) The vertical wireway door of this section will also have an identifying label ldquoDEVICENET TERMINATING RESISTOR KIT LOCATED BEHIND THIS DOORrdquo (See Figure 5) If the section does not contain a vertical wireway the bag will be attached to a wireway tire bar on the right hand side of the section and the label will be located on the door of the section
Jack Screw Jack Screw
Terminating Resistor
Black
BlueWhite
Red
Shield wire ground shield at one end only
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
10 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 5 DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Terminating Resistor KitPart 2100H-DNTR1
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 11
Installing Terminating Resistor Guidelines
When installing terminating resistors apply the following two rules
1 Use only two terminating resistors in any network
2 Install terminating resistors at the ends (communication andor physical) of the trunk line
Incorrect placement of terminating resistors andor using more than two will cause improper network operation and result in communication losses
For visibility accessibility and safety the ideal locations for terminating resistors within a DeviceNet MCC are the vertical wireway ports closest to the physical ends of the total trunk line In a leftmost section this is the topmost port in a rightmost section this is the bottommost port (see example below) When connecting a DeviceNet MCC to remote equipment the trunk line may end at a device such as a PLC card In these instances a terminating resistor should be installed in the final connector to that device
IMPORTANT The portion of the MCC trunk line that is to the left of the leftmost terminating resistor and to the right of the rightmost terminating resistor is considered drop cable and must be included in the total drop cable calculations See Calculating Cable Lengths
Topmost Port
Bottommost Port
When the rightmost section is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the bottommost port
When the left is one end of the trunk line install the terminating resistor in the topmost port
Cable to the left of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Cable to the right of the terminating resistor is now drop cable
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
12 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Terminating Resistor Examples
When installing resistors the type of DeviceNet Architecture must first be determined There are two types of architecture
bull All devices internal to the MCCbull Devices internal and external to the MCC
Installing Terminating Resistors with all Devices Internal to the MCC
This architecture is the simplest Since all devices are internal to the MCC no special wiring needs to be done
Figure 6 Figure 7 and Figure 8 show typical designs and placements of terminating resistors
Figure 6 shows an MCC with a DeviceNet scanner located in a section with no plug-in units In this section there are no wireway plugs
Figure 6 DeviceNet scanner installed in a section no other plug-in unitsOne DeviceNet Network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 13
Figure 7 shows a typical MCC with the DeviceNet scanner located in a plug-in unit
Figure 7 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug -in unit One DeviceNet network
Figure 8 shows an MCC with two DeviceNet scanners and two different networks When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed
Figure 8 DeviceNet scanner installed in a plug-in unitTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
First DeviceNet Network Second DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
14 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Installing Termination Resistors with Devices Internal and External to the MCC
This architecture is more complex because external devices must be wired to the internal network of the MCC Careful attention must be given to the type of cable selected and the method of installation
Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 and Figure 12 show where to place the terminating resistors when external devices are used
Figure 9 has a DeviceNet scanner remote from the MCC In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 9 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCOne DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 15
Figure 10 shows a single MCC with two DeviceNet networks and two remote scanners When an MCC has two networks four terminating resistors are needed In this example the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 10 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCTwo DeviceNet networks
DeviceNet Scanners
Do not splice trunk lines between two separate DeviceNet networks
Second DeviceNet NetworkFirst DeviceNet Network
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
16 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Figure 11 show two MCC lineups connected as one network with one remote scanner The cable connecting to the two MCCs must be trunk cable Also the cable from the scanner to the MCC wireway port is an extension of the DeviceNet trunk
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 17
Figure 12 shows a remote scanner and a remote device This is a single network and all cable external to the MCC must be trunk cable
Figure 12 DeviceNet scanner remote from MCCsOne DeviceNet network
PowerFlexDrive
DeviceNet Scanner
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
18 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
NOTE If the terminating resistor is being placed at a device which is remote from the MCC it will be necessary to remove the resistor from the supplied plug and installing it in an open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug
Adding a Motor Control Center Unit to a DeviceNet System
General
Use this section to add Bulletin 2100 units to a DeviceNet MCC Each DeviceNet component is factory wired within the unit and has a communication cable that plugs into the device on one end and generally into a vertical wireway DeviceNet port on the other end
Procedure
For a CENTERLINE MCC with a Class 1 DeviceNet cabling system
1 Determine the proper length of patch cable by measuring from the DeviceNet device in the unit to the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway
Terminating Resistor
Ten-terminal plug connector with terminating resistor plugged into a DeviceNet module
Shield wire if used
Terminating resistor position in open row of terminals on a ten-terminal plug connector
ATTENTION
Before performing any service or maintenance activities on MCC units or sections disconnect all power sources
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 19
NOTE Cable can be made as short as is practical since excessive drop lengths can lower data transmission rates Refer to DeviceNet Selection Guide publication DNET-SG001x-EN-P for specific design parameters
2 Cut the cable to the desired length by removing material from the end of the cable that has no connector plug Strip the cable and attach the separate five-terminal plug connector The wire is color coded for simplified wiring
3 Plug the one connector into the DeviceNet component in the unit Plug the other plug connector into the DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway Torque the screws on both connectors to 5 lb-in (055 Nm)
4 If there is a need to plug in more devices than available DeviceNet ports in the vertical wireway use a DeviceNet splitter connector (Catalog Number 1485P-P1J5-UU5 or Part Number 42122-304-51) This allows two devices to be plugged into one port
Figure 13 Connecting the unit DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway
Splicing DeviceNet Communication Cables in Motor Control Centers
General
This section describes the recommended procedure for splicing DeviceNet communication cables (trunk lines) in MCCs It must be used in conjunction with publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Cable can be spliced to the leftmost or rightmost section of an MCC lineup
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
20 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Procedure
1 Join the sections following steps 1 through 7 on pages 1 and 2 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P To access splice connections remove the red bus cover through the vertical wireway opening
2 Splice the horizontal bus following steps 1 through 4 on pages 10 through 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P Do not replace covers or plates at this time
3 To splice DeviceNet trunk lines between separate sections connect the linking plug from the right section into the left section linking receptacle Torque connector screws to 5 lb-in (06 Nm)
4 When joining new sections to an existing MCC remove the terminating resistor from the original final section (the one to which new sections were just spliced) Install the terminating resistor according to the information supplied in the sections ldquoTerminating Resistorsrdquo and ldquoInstalling Terminating Resistorsrdquo beginning on page 8
5 Follow step 5 on page 11 of publication 2100-IN010x-EN-P
6 When new sections are added always do the following design calculationsbull Check the total number of nodes See System Architecture beginning
on page 2 If the number of nodes exceeds the guidelines add a network
bull Recalculate the total power consumption If it exceeds 8 A add a power supply
bull Verify the cumulative trunk length See System Architecturebull Verify the cumulative drop length See System Architecture
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 21
Figure 14 MCC Section (Series M)
Figure 15 MCC Section (Series L)
DeviceNet Trunk line
Typical single MCC section (Series M)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series M)
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking Plug
Linking Receptacle
Linking Receptacle
3-phase horizontal power bus
Linking PlugDeviceNet Trunk line
Typical Single MCC Section (Series L)
Front view of DeviceNet splice (Series L)
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
22 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
DeviceNet Power Supply
A power supply unit that meets all DeviceNet requirements can be supplied with the MCCmdashcatalog number 2100-DPS__ (consult your local Rockwell Automation salesperson or Allen-Bradley distributor) It is available in three configurations with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect and control transformer or with no disconnecting means requiring a separate 110ndash120 V source Redundant configurations are also available A cable connects the output of the power supply to a DeviceNet port in the back of the vertical wireway The cable is already connected when the power supply unit ships installed in the MCC
Remote power supplies should meet the following requirements per ODVA
bull Rated 24 Vdc (plusmn1)bull Rise time of less than 250 milliseconds to within 5 of 24Vdc at full
load of 8 ampsbull Current limit protection of 8 amps continuos and 10 amps for the first
250 mSecbull Sized correctly to provide each device with its required powermdasheach
device typically requires 90ndash165 mA bull Derated for temperature using the manufacturerrsquos guidelines
Connecting Power SuppliesmdashRemote or in the MCC Line-Up
Connecting power supplies according to these guidelines will minimize voltage drops in the DeviceNet system and ensure proper supply voltage to system devices Refer to the Media Design Installation Guide DNET-UM072x-EN-P for detailed connecting instructions
Series M Sections
For line-ups with more than eight sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system within one section either way of the middle of the line-up
IMPORTANT The DeviceNet cable system requires a 24Vdc power source to operate The power supply must
bull Meet NEC Class 1 requirements as outlined in Article 725
bull Be DeviceNet compatible as specified in the ODVA requirements
IMPORTANT Power supplies that do not satisfy both points listed above can result in damage to the DeviceNet signal and components as well as failure to comply with NEC local codes and inspection
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 23
For line-ups with eight or fewer sections connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Series L Sections
Connect the power supply to the DeviceNet system where it is convenient (no location restrictions)
Network Grounding at the Power Supply
The DeviceNet cable must be grounded at only one location The ideal choice is at the power supply Ground the power supply and 24 Vdc common (black wire) using 8 AWG wire
Best Grounding Practice
bull If the power supply comes installed in the MCC the black 24 Vdc common terminal is grounded within the unit To improve the grounding use 8 AWG green wire and ground the black 24Vdc common terminal to a very stable ground external to the MCC (or to an optional TE ground inside the MCC)
bull If the power supply is external the same grounding recommendations apply
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
24 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Connecting Two Power Supplies
An additional 24 Vdc Class 1 power supply must be installed for MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections When using two supplies the red conductor between the power supplies must be broken Locate a linking connector between sections and disconnect the red conductor (See Figure 16)
Ground only ONE of the two power supplies
Figure 16 Connecting Two Power Supplies
Position each power supply to ensure that it feeds a maximum of eight sections to the left or right (refer to the sample line-up below)
MCC line-ups with more than 17 sections could exceed the 75 meters (246 feet) trunk length limit to support 500 kbps communications When the trunk length exceeds this limit 250 kbps communications should be specified
Power SupplyPower Supply
Red V+
White CAN_H
Blue CAN_L
Black V- (common)
BREAK
Power SupplyPower Supply
Motor Control Center line-up with more then 17 sections
Break Red Conductor
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 25
Start-Up and Training Aids IntelliCENTER MCC Design Start-Up and Training Course
Course Description
This course provides the concepts knowledge and tools necessary to design specify install troubleshoot and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC
Content
bull Basics of communication and Rockwell Automation networksbull Control and communication architecture overview with sample
architecture problems solved in class (selecting networks network devices network speeds etc)
bull DeviceNet MCC structure units and wiring technical details for both low voltage and medium voltage MCCs
bull Demonstration of software associated with DeviceNet MCCs (RSLinx and RSNetworkx for DeviceNet)
bull Necessary steps for a successful start-up including installing EDS filesbull Maintenance issues such as adding MCC units to IntelliCENTER
MCCs replacement of DeviceNet devices and reommended toolsbull Network configuration mapping of scanners and PLC programming in
a DeviceNet MCC system including hands-on exercises with a ControlLogix system
Who Should Attend
This course is intended for control engineers electrical technicians and system integrators who will be involved in designing installing and using IntelliCENTERDeviceNet MCCs
Prerequisites
Familiarity with Windows and PLC programming
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
26 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Topical Outline
Course Dates and Prices
Refer to wwwrockwellautomationcomtrainingSelect course CCI 105
Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs
The Allen-Bradley DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER MCCs provide users with a DeviceNet network that is wired commissioned and tested resulting in a true plug-and-play integrated solution As with any control system through a successful installation requires the proper tools This kit includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that will prove helpful for
bull Starting up a DeviceNet systembull Commission DeviceNet nodes (setting baud rate and node number)bull Testing DeviceNet devicesbull Training on DeviceNet
bull Basics of DeviceNetbull NetLinx Overviewbull RSLinx and RSNetworkx bull DeviceNet wiringbull Receiving and installing
DeviceNet MCC sectionsbull IntelliCENTER software
configurationbull Installing and registering EDS
filesbull Adding MCC units to
IntelliCENTER MCCs
bull Replacement of DeviceNet devices
bull Hands-on IntelliCENTER labbull Support resourcesbull Mapping scanners -
introduction examples hands-on
bull Programming PLCs connected to DeviceNet - introduction examples hands-on with a ControlLogix system
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 27
The kit includes a mini network a DeviceNet configurator tool and assorted components
Mini Network
bull Trunk line with three DeviceNet ports and terminating resistors
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 29
The following items are suggested for IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCC installation and maintenance
bull Field Support kit for DeviceNet MCCs 2100H-DFSK1bull Hand toolsmdashhigh-quality side-cutter needle nose pliers wire stripperbull Short length of Class 1 8 A round adapter cable with five-terminal
receptacle on each endbull Ten foot (3 m) personal computer (PC) cable with five-terminal plug on
each endmdashpart number 2100H-ICPC120bull Digital multi-metermdashFluke 79 or equivalentbull ODVA DeviceNet monitor mdash order form available at
httpwwwabcomintellicenterinstructions or contact product support
bull Laptop personal computer with the following softwarendash RS Networx for DeviceNetndash RS Linxndash ControlFlash update softwarendash RS Logix 5 for PLC5ndash RS Logix 500 for SLC and MicroLogixndash RS Logix 5000 for ControlLogixndash IntelliCENTER software
Training Cases
For the ultimate in-house training - two styles of IntelliCENTER training cases are available
2-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Starter with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
bull Motorbull Load
1-Unit Training Case
bull Starter with E3 electronic overload relay
bull Load for each phase
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
30 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
System Design Installation Checklist
When installing a DeviceNet MCC use the following checklist before applying power to the network
bull Number of nodes does not exceed 64 with three nodes reserved for scanner (node 00) PC (node 62) and new device (node 63)
bull Individual drop lengths do not exceed 20 feet (6 m)bull Cumulative drop length does not exceed the desired network baud rate
limit 128 feet (39 m) at 500 kbps 256 feet (78 m) at 250 kbps or 512 feet (156 m) at 125 kbps
bull Total trunk length does not exceed the maximum allowable per the network baud rate 246 feet (75 m) at 500 kbps 656 feet (200 m) at 250 kbps or 1378 feet (420 m) at 125 kbps
NOTE For IntelliCENTER 500 kbps provides optimum performance but 250 kbps may be used (125 kbps is not recommended)
bull Verify that all devices are programmed to the same baud rate Autobaud can be used for each device The scanner will then set the baud rate for the entire system
bull Verify that terminating resistors are in place at the trunk line terminations and measure for proper resistors (121 ohms 14 W 1 metal film)
bull Verify that the power supply for the system is 24 Vdcbull Total power load and distribution points do not exceed 8 Abull The system has one and only one earth ground for the V-bull There is an earth ground connectionbull All connections are inspected for loose wires opens and shorts
DeviceNet Software Installation Checklist
The following general steps along with references for more information are provided to assist with the DeviceNet software installation process
1 Install the communication card in your personal computer
2 Load the Windows hardware drivers for the communication card
3 Load RSNetworxtrade for DeviceNet and RSLinx software
4 Configure the RSLinx driverndash Within the RSWho function make sure no unrecognized devices (ie
ldquordquo symbols) appear for any devices If an unrecognized device appears load the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file See the ldquoHow to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)rdquo section below for further details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 31
5 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program and configure devices (eg full load current acceleration rate etc)
Do not download to a device before uploading from that device Otherwise the node and baud rates will be overwritten requiring each device to be individually manually reprogrammed
Make sure to set communication-loss behavior for each device
6 Use RSNetworx for DeviceNet to program the DeviceNet scanner
7 Write the PLC program
8 If IntelliCENTER software is provided load per the IntelliCENTER Software User Guide (publication 2100-UM002x-EN-P)
How to Find Electronic Data Sheets (EDS)
Background
After installing IntelliCENTER software an Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file must be registered for each unique device in the MCC This section details how to perform that task
IMPORTANT Do not leave the RSWho constantly browsing Be sure to close the RSWho screen or disable the Autobrowse
IMPORTANT RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to change baud rates and node numbers but remember that the devices are normally pre-programmed at the factory
IMPORTANT When using a 2100-GK61 communication module keep in mind there are two extra bytes of receive data for the inputs on the 2100-GK61 Make sure the number of bytes in the scanner configuration corresponds with the number of bytes in the device See the 2100-GK61 user manual (publication 2100-UM001x-EN-P chapter 4) for more details
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
32 DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers
Definition of EDS Files
EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration toolsmdashsuch as RSNetworx and IntelliCENTER softwaremdashto help identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a productrsquos device type product revision and configurable parameters on a DeviceNet network
Necessary EDS Files
For IntelliCENTER MCCs the data CD contains a directory (ltcdromgtltordergtltitemgtEDS) of all EDS files necessary for the devices in your IntelliCENTER The EDS files will be automatically registered by the installation program
For IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet MCCs a separated ldquoEDS filerdquo CD is provided This CD contains EDS files for all DeviceNet products found in MCCs
Installing EDS Files
The EDS files are installed with a program from Rockwell Software that is also on the IntelliCENTER data CD (in the same directory as the EDS files) This program is called ldquoRSHWareexerdquo
To install the EDS files
1 Run the program RSHWareexe
2 Click AddRemove
3 Select Register an EDS file Click Next
4 Select Register a directory of EDS files
5 Browse to the EDS directory on the data CD
6 Click Next
7 The Installer will display the test results Click Next to continue
8 The Installer will allow you to change the graphic image for each device Click Next to continue
9 The Installer will display the final task summary Click Next to continue
10 Click Finish when completed
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006
DeviceNettrade Motor Control Centers 33
Finding EDS Files for Other Devices
EDS files can be obtained at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Uploading EDS file from the Device RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
Uploading EDS Files from the Device
RSNetworx for DeviceNet can also be used to upload an EDS file directly from the device If an EDS file cannot be found by other methods refer to the RSNetworx help file for steps to upload an EDS file
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
wwwabcommcc
Publication 2100-TD019C-EN-PmdashMarch 2006 PN-2516234Supersedes Publication 2100-TD019B-EN-PmdashMay 2003 Copyright copy 2006 Rockwell Automation Inc Printed in the USA
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-TD019C-EN-P
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
EA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009
03012006
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
4
36
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 85 x 11 saddle stitch Cover Stock = 90
25162
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
2100-UM003D-EN-P
IntelliCENTER How to Contact Us Card
EA
1
Marketing Commercial
19009
11012001
5
F
NA
LANDSCAPE
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
1
2
1
CARD
110
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
73
9
NA
NA
na
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Red Bleed across top of front and backText Stock = 110 WhiteFinal page size 73 (w) x 90 (h)Text Ink = Black
NA
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
